]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Mark _init and _fini for --gc-sections
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
cd6d6c15
NC
1149@end table
1150
ece2d90e 1151Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1152
1153@kindex -(
1154@cindex groups of archives
1155@item -( @var{archives} -)
1156@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1157The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1158either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1159
1160The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1161references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1162the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1163archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1164object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1165would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1166they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1167resolved.
1168
1169Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1170it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1171more archives.
1172
69da35b5
NC
1173@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1174@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1175@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1176@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1177Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1178recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1179and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1180the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1181behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1182so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1183restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1184
4a43e768
AM
1185@kindex --as-needed
1186@kindex --no-as-needed
1187@item --as-needed
1188@itemx --no-as-needed
1189This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1190on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1191the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1192on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1193needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1194emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1195non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1196the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1197non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1198Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1199the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1200needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1201from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1202
e56f61be
L
1203@kindex --add-needed
1204@kindex --no-add-needed
1205@item --add-needed
1206@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1207These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1208their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1209options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1210and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1211
252b5132
RH
1212@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1213@item -assert @var{keyword}
1214This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1215
1216@kindex -Bdynamic
1217@kindex -dy
1218@kindex -call_shared
1219@item -Bdynamic
1220@itemx -dy
1221@itemx -call_shared
1222Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1223for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1224default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1225for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1226multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1227@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1228
a1ab1d2a
UD
1229@kindex -Bgroup
1230@item -Bgroup
1231Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1232section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1233object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1234@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1235only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1236
252b5132
RH
1237@kindex -Bstatic
1238@kindex -dn
1239@kindex -non_shared
1240@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1241@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1242@itemx -dn
1243@itemx -non_shared
1244@itemx -static
1245Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1246platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1247variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1248may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1249library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1250option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1251option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1252shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1253references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1254libraries.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@kindex -Bsymbolic
1257@item -Bsymbolic
1258When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1259definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1260for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1261within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1262platforms which support shared libraries.
1263
40b36307
L
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1265@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1267symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1268This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1269libraries.
1270
55255dae
L
1271@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1272@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1273Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1274typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1275global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1276within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1277to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1278in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1279which support shared libraries.
1280
1281The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1282scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1283
40b36307
L
1284@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1285@item --dynamic-list-data
1286Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1287
1288@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1289@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1290Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1291is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1292
0b8a70d9
L
1293@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1294@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1295Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1296
252b5132
RH
1297@kindex --check-sections
1298@kindex --no-check-sections
1299@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1300@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1301Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1302been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1303perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1304suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1305allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1306restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1307Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1308force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1309option.
252b5132 1310
ddbb8a31
NC
1311@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1312@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1313@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1314@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1315This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1316by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1317command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1318output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1319input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1320specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1321follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1322behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1323
1324This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1325libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1326mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1327their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1328required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1329the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1330dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1331symbols.
1332
252b5132
RH
1333@cindex cross reference table
1334@kindex --cref
1335@item --cref
1336Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1337generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1338Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1339
1340The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1341easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1342sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1343symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1344definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1345where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1346symbol are listed.
252b5132 1347
4818e05f
AM
1348@cindex common allocation
1349@kindex --no-define-common
1350@item --no-define-common
1351This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1352The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1353@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1354
1355The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1356the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1357of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1358forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1359Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1360from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1361This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1362and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1363duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1364paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1365
252b5132 1366@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1367@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1368@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1369Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1370address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1371times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1372limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1373context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1374symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1375constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1376using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1377@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1378equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1379
1380@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1381@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1382@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1383@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1384@itemx --no-demangle
1385These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1386and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1387present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1388underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1389mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1390different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1391to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1392demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1393is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1394
1395@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1396@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1397@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1398@item -I@var{file}
1399@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1400Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1401generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1402linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1403doing.
1404
7ce691ae 1405@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1406@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1407@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1408@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1409Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1410with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1411
252b5132
RH
1412@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1413@item --force-exe-suffix
1414Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1415
1416If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1417@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1418the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1419option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1420Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1421it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1422
1423@kindex --gc-sections
1424@kindex --no-gc-sections
1425@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1426@item --gc-sections
1427@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1428Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1429targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1430performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1431@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1432
d5465ba2
AM
1433@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1434examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1435symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1436command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1437referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1438libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1439referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1440the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1441relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1442
ac69cbc6 1443This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1444@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1445specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1446a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1447
c17d87de
NC
1448@kindex --print-gc-sections
1449@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1450@cindex garbage collection
1451@item --print-gc-sections
1452@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1453List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1454printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1455collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1456default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1457be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1458line.
1459
30824704
RM
1460@kindex --print-output-format
1461@cindex output format
1462@item --print-output-format
1463Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1464other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1465in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1466
252b5132
RH
1467@cindex help
1468@cindex usage
1469@kindex --help
1470@item --help
1471Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1472
ea20a7da
CC
1473@kindex --target-help
1474@item --target-help
1475Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1476
2509a395
SL
1477@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1478@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1479Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1480@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1481
1482@cindex memory usage
1483@kindex --no-keep-memory
1484@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1485@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1486symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1487instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1488necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1489while linking a large executable.
1490
1491@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1492@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1493@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1494@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1495Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1496is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1497The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1498behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1499libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1500
aa713662
L
1501@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1502@kindex -z muldefs
1503@item --allow-multiple-definition
1504@itemx -z muldefs
1505Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1506report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1507first definition will be used.
1508
b79e8c78 1509@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1510@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1511@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1512@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1513Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1514This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1515determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1516shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1517how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1518
903249d7
NC
1519The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1520referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1521an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1522a shared library.
1523
1524The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1525libraries specified at link time are that:
1526
1527@itemize @bullet
1528@item
1529A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1530that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1531resolvable at load time.
1532@item
1533There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1534symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1535
1536The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1537select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1538architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1539appropriate memset function.
1540@end itemize
b79e8c78 1541
31941635
L
1542@kindex --no-undefined-version
1543@item --no-undefined-version
1544Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1545it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1546will be issued instead.
1547
3e3b46e5
PB
1548@kindex --default-symver
1549@item --default-symver
1550Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1551exported symbols.
1552
1553@kindex --default-imported-symver
1554@item --default-imported-symver
1555Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1556imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1557
252b5132
RH
1558@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1559@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1560Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1561files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1562been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1563This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1564errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1565have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1566inappropriate.
1567
fe7929ce
AM
1568@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1569@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1570Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1571library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1572
252b5132
RH
1573@kindex --no-whole-archive
1574@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1575Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1576archive files.
1577
1578@cindex output file after errors
1579@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1580@item --noinhibit-exec
1581Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1582Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1583errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1584when it issues any error whatsoever.
1585
0a9c1c8e
CD
1586@kindex -nostdlib
1587@item -nostdlib
1588Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1589command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1590(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1591
252b5132 1592@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1594@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1595@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1596file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1597@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1598object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1599object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1600should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1601usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1602name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1603list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1604command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1605this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1606@end ifclear
1607
36af4a4e
JJ
1608@kindex -pie
1609@kindex --pic-executable
1610@item -pie
1611@itemx --pic-executable
1612@cindex position independent executables
1613Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1614ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1615libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1616address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1617normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1618defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1619
252b5132
RH
1620@kindex -qmagic
1621@item -qmagic
1622This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1623
1624@kindex -Qy
1625@item -Qy
1626This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1627
1628@kindex --relax
1629@cindex synthesizing linker
1630@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1631@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1632@item --relax
28d5f677 1633@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1634An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1635@ifset GENERIC
1636This option is only supported on a few targets.
1637@end ifset
1638@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1639@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1640@end ifset
1641@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1642@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1643@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1644@ifset XTENSA
1645@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1646@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1647@ifset M68HC11
1648@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1649@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1650@ifset NIOSII
1651@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1652@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1653@ifset POWERPC
1654@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1655@end ifset
252b5132 1656
28d5f677
NC
1657On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1658global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1659addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1660synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1661instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1662
1663On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1664debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1665@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1666This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1667family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1668@end ifset
1669
1670@ifset GENERIC
1671On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1672but ignored.
1673@end ifset
1674
28d5f677
NC
1675On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1676@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1677
252b5132
RH
1678@cindex retaining specified symbols
1679@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1680@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1682@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1683Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1684discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1685symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1686@ifset GENERIC
1687(such as VxWorks)
1688@end ifset
1689where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1690run-time memory.
1691
1692@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1693or symbols needed for relocations.
1694
1695You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1696line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1697
1698@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1699@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1700@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1701@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1702Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1703linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1704arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1705them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1706also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1707objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1708@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1709ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1710@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1711
ff5dcc92 1712The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1713SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1714@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1715runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1716options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1717gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1718file systems.
252b5132 1719
ff5dcc92 1720For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1721followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1722the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1723@end ifset
1724
1725@ifset GENERIC
1726@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1727@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1728@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1729When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1730happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1731of the input files.
1732
1733When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1734non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1735shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1736explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1737specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1738@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1739either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1740appearing multiple times.
1741
28c309a2
NC
1742This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1743that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1744is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1745runtime linker would do.
1746
252b5132 1747The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1748libraries:
252b5132
RH
1749@enumerate
1750@item
ff5dcc92 1751Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1752@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1753Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1754between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1755specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1756used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1757at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1758by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1759the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1760@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1761On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1762@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1763environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1764@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1765On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1766directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1767@item
a1b8d843 1768For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1769variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1770@item
ec4eb78a
L
1771For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1772@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1773libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1774@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1775@item
252b5132
RH
1776The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1777@item
1778For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1779exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1780@end enumerate
1781
1782If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1783warning and continue with the link.
1784@end ifset
1785
1786@kindex -shared
1787@kindex -Bshareable
1788@item -shared
1789@itemx -Bshareable
1790@cindex shared libraries
1791Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1792and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1793shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1794undefined symbols in the link.
1795
252b5132 1796@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1797@item --sort-common
1798@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1799@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1800This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1801ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1802sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1803eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1804between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1805specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --sort-section=name
1808@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1809This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1810patterns in the linker script.
1811
2509a395
SL
1812@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1813@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1814This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1815patterns in the linker script.
1816
252b5132 1817@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1818@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1819Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1820each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1821size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1822
1823@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1824@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1825Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1826output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1827This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1828certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1829cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1830that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1831support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1832input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1833more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1834many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1835
1836@kindex --stats
1837@item --stats
1838Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1839as execution time and memory usage.
1840
2509a395 1841@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1842@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1843Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1844configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1845that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1846
252b5132
RH
1847@kindex --traditional-format
1848@cindex traditional format
1849@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1850For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1851the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1852use the traditional format instead.
1853
1854@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1855For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1856symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1857full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1858@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1859trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1860combine duplicate entries.
1861
2509a395
SL
1862@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1863@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1864Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1865address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1866times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1867line.
1868@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1869for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1870@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1871should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1872sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1873
2509a395
SL
1874@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1875@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1876@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1877@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1878@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1879@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1880@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1881Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1882@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1883
2509a395
SL
1884@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1885@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1886@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1887When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1888byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1889
9d5777a3
RM
1890@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1891@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1892@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1893When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1894the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1895text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1896
0d705e9f
AM
1897@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1898@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1899@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1900When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1901model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1902
560e09e9
NC
1903@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1904@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1905Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1906values for @samp{method}:
1907
1908@table @samp
1909@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1910Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1911
1912@item report-all
da8bce14 1913Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1914
1915@item ignore-in-object-files
1916Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1917ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1918
1919@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1920Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1921ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1922when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1923libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1924command line.
1925@end table
1926
1927The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1928by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1929
1930Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1931unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1932can change this to a warning.
1933
1715a13c
L
1934@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1935@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1936@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1937@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1938Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1939supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1940the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1941argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1942
1943@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1944@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1945@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1946Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1947used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1948about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1949is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1950see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1951use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1952symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1953@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1954
7ce691ae 1955@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1956@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1957@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1958@item --warn-common
1959Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1960a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1961but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1962you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1963Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1964warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1965
1966There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1967
1968@table @samp
1969@item int i = 1;
1970A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1971file.
1972
1973@item extern int i;
1974An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1975There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1976variable somewhere.
1977
1978@item int i;
1979A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1980variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1981The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1982single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1983size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1984a definition of the same variable.
1985@end table
1986
1987The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1988Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1989just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1990encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1991a common symbol.
1992
1993@enumerate
1994@item
1995Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1996definition for the symbol.
1997@smallexample
1998@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1999 overridden by definition
2000@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2001@end smallexample
2002
2003@item
2004Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2005the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2006except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2007@smallexample
2008@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2009 overriding common
2010@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2011@end smallexample
2012
2013@item
2014Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2015@smallexample
2016@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2017 of `@var{symbol}'
2018@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2019@end smallexample
2020
2021@item
2022Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2023@smallexample
2024@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2025 overridden by larger common
2026@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2027@end smallexample
2028
2029@item
2030Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2031the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2032encountered in a different order.
2033@smallexample
2034@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2035 overriding smaller common
2036@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2037@end smallexample
2038@end enumerate
2039
2040@kindex --warn-constructors
2041@item --warn-constructors
2042Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2043object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2044detect the use of global constructors.
2045
2046@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2047@item --warn-multiple-gp
2048Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2049This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2050Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2051section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2052of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2053base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2054base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2055bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2056large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2057values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2058option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2059
2060@kindex --warn-once
2061@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2062@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2063@item --warn-once
2064Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2065which refers to it.
2066
3ea60775
NC
2067@kindex --warn-orphan
2068@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2069@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2070@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2071@item --warn-orphan
2072The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2073warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2074output file. @xref{Orphan Sections} The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2075option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2076sections.
2077
252b5132
RH
2078@kindex --warn-section-align
2079@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2080@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2081@item --warn-section-align
2082Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2083alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2084The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2085is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2086the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2087
8fdd7217
NC
2088@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2089@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2090Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2091
a0c402a5
L
2092@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2093@item --warn-alternate-em
2094Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2095
560e09e9
NC
2096@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2097@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2098If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2099@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2100This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2101
2102@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2103@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2104This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2105it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2106
252b5132
RH
2107@kindex --whole-archive
2108@cindex including an entire archive
2109@item --whole-archive
2110For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2111@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2112in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2113files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2114library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2115library. This option may be used more than once.
2116
7ec229ce 2117Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2118about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2119Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2120list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2121your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2122
2509a395
SL
2123@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2124@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2125Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2126@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2127undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2128@var{symbol}.
2129
2130This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2131wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2132wishes to call the system function, it should call
2133@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2134
2135Here is a trivial example:
2136
2137@smallexample
2138void *
cc2f008e 2139__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2140@{
cc2f008e 2141 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2142 return __real_malloc (c);
2143@}
2144@end smallexample
2145
ff5dcc92 2146If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2147all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2148instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2149call the real @code{malloc} function.
2150
2151You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2152links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2153you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2154file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2155call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2156
6aa29e7b
JJ
2157@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2158@item --eh-frame-hdr
2159Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2160@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2161
e41b3a13
JJ
2162@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2163@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2164Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2165generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2166if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2167
6c1439be
L
2168@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2169@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2170@item --enable-new-dtags
2171@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2172This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2173systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2174@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2175and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2176If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2177created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2178those options are only available for ELF systems.
2179
2d643429 2180@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2181@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2182Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2183close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2184time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2185increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2186value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2187
fdc90cb4
JJ
2188@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2189@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2190Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2191@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2192new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2193the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2194hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2195
35835446
JR
2196@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2197@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2198This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2199linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2200for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2201about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2202
4f9c04f7 2203Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22041021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2205run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2206has been used.
2207
2208The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2209enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2210
c0065db7
RM
2211@kindex --build-id
2212@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2213@item --build-id
2214@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2215Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2216or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2217unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2218@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2219@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2220@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2221the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2222string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2223@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2224is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2225
2226The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2227that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2228unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2229to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2230file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2231string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2232
2233Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2234@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2235@end table
2236
0285c67d
NC
2237@c man end
2238
36f63dca 2239@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2240
0285c67d
NC
2241@c man begin OPTIONS
2242
ff5dcc92 2243The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2244the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2245normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2246use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2247@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2248like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2249symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2250object file).
2251
2252In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2253support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2254PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2255values by either a space or an equals sign.
2256
ff5dcc92 2257@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2258
2259@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2260@item --add-stdcall-alias
2261If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2262as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2264
2265@kindex --base-file
2266@item --base-file @var{file}
2267Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2268addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2269@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2270[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2271
2272@kindex --dll
2273@item --dll
2274Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2275@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2276file.
bb10df36 2277[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2278
88183869
DK
2279@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2280@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2281@item --enable-long-section-names
2282@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2283The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2284the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2285for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2286fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2287to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2288allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2289disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2290generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2291as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2292with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2293GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2294information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2295option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2296section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2297when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2298image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2299[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2300
252b5132
RH
2301@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2302@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2303@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2304@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2305If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2306do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2307only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2308resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2309undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2310@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2311to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2312warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2313import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2314to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2315feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2316@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2317mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2319
522f09cd
KT
2320@kindex --leading-underscore
2321@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2322@item --leading-underscore
2323@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2324For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2325in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2326disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2327
252b5132
RH
2328@cindex DLLs, creating
2329@kindex --export-all-symbols
2330@item --export-all-symbols
2331If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2332be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2333otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2334explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2335attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2336option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2337@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2338@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2339exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2340re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2341such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2342@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2343@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2344Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2345not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2346extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2347(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2348These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2349@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2350@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2351@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2352@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2354
2355@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2356@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2357Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2358exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2360
2927aaca
NC
2361@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2362@item --exclude-all-symbols
2363Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2364[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2365
252b5132
RH
2366@kindex --file-alignment
2367@item --file-alignment
2368Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2369file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2370512.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2372
2373@cindex heap size
2374@kindex --heap
2375@item --heap @var{reserve}
2376@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2377Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2378to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2379committed.
bb10df36 2380[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2381
2382@cindex image base
2383@kindex --image-base
2384@item --image-base @var{value}
2385Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2386the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2387is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2388your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2389other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2390for dlls.
bb10df36 2391[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2392
2393@kindex --kill-at
2394@item --kill-at
2395If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2396symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2397[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2398
26d2d8a2
BF
2399@kindex --large-address-aware
2400@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2401If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2402header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2403greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2404or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2405section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2406[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2407
f69a2f97
NC
2408@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2409@item --disable-large-address-aware
2410Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2411This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2412driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2413addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2414[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2415
252b5132
RH
2416@kindex --major-image-version
2417@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2418Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2419[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2420
2421@kindex --major-os-version
2422@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2423Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2424[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2425
2426@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2427@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2428Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2429[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2430
2431@kindex --minor-image-version
2432@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2433Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2434[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2435
2436@kindex --minor-os-version
2437@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2438Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2439[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2440
2441@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2442@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2443Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2444[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2445
2446@cindex DEF files, creating
2447@cindex DLLs, creating
2448@kindex --output-def
2449@item --output-def @var{file}
2450The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2451file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2452(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2453library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2454automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2455[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2456
b044cda1
CW
2457@cindex DLLs, creating
2458@kindex --out-implib
2459@item --out-implib @var{file}
2460The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2461import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2462import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2463may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2464makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2465creation step.
bb10df36 2466[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2467
2468@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2469@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2470@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2471Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2472@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2473By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2474for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2475execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2476[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2477
2478@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2479@item --disable-auto-image-base
2480Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2481user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2482default.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2484
2485@cindex DLLs, linking to
2486@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2487@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2488When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2489search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2490@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2491between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2492uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2493@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2494[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2495
2496@kindex --enable-auto-import
2497@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2498Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2499DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2500building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2501'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2502to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2503specification published by Microsoft.
2504
e2a83dd0
NC
2505Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2506data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2507placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2508around a problem with consts that is described here:
2509http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2510
4d8907ac
DS
2511Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2512see this message:
0d888aac 2513
ece2d90e 2514"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2515documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2516
ece2d90e
NC
2517This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2518ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2519allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2520fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2521constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2522multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2523this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2524of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2525the warning, and exit.
2526
2527There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2528data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2529
2fa9fc65
NC
2530One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2531of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2532this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2533
c0065db7
RM
2534A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2535that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2536there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2537a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2538
2539@example
2540extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2541extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2542 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2543@end example
2544
2545or
2546
2547@example
2548extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2549extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2550 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2551@end example
2552
c0065db7 2553For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2554is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2555
2556@example
2557extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2558extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2559 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2560@end example
2561
c406afaf
NC
2562or
2563
2564@example
2565extern long long extern_ll;
2566extern_ll -->
2567 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2568@end example
2569
2fa9fc65 2570A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2571'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2572@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2573requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2574building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2575merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2576between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2577constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2578
2579Original:
2580@example
2581--foo.h
2582extern int arr[];
2583--foo.c
2584#include "foo.h"
2585void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2586 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2587@}
2588@end example
2589
2590Solution 1:
2591@example
2592--foo.h
2593extern int arr[];
2594--foo.c
2595#include "foo.h"
2596void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2597 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2598 volatile int *parr = arr;
2599 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2600@}
2601@end example
2602
2603Solution 2:
2604@example
2605--foo.h
2606/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2607#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2608 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2609#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2610#else
2611#define FOO_IMPORT
2612#endif
2613extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2614--foo.c
2615#include "foo.h"
2616void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2617 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2618@}
2619@end example
2620
c0065db7 2621A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2622library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2623for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2624functions).
bb10df36 2625[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2626
2627@kindex --disable-auto-import
2628@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2629Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2630@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2631[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2632
2fa9fc65
NC
2633@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2634@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2635If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2636that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2637a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2638environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2640
2641@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2642@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2643Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2644DLLs.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2646
b044cda1
CW
2647@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2648@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2649Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2650[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2651
252b5132
RH
2652@kindex --section-alignment
2653@item --section-alignment
2654Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2655addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2656[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2657
2658@cindex stack size
2659@kindex --stack
2660@item --stack @var{reserve}
2661@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2662Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2663to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2664committed.
bb10df36 2665[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2666
2667@kindex --subsystem
2668@item --subsystem @var{which}
2669@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2670@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2671Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2672legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2673@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2674the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2675@var{which}.
bb10df36 2676[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2677
2f563b51
DK
2678The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2679of the PE file header:
2680[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2681
2d5c3743
NC
2682@kindex --high-entropy-va
2683@item --high-entropy-va
2684Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2685(ASLR).
2686
2f563b51
DK
2687@kindex --dynamicbase
2688@item --dynamicbase
2689The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2690randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2691Vista for i386 PE targets.
2692
2693@kindex --forceinteg
2694@item --forceinteg
2695Code integrity checks are enforced.
2696
2697@kindex --nxcompat
2698@item --nxcompat
2699The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2700This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2701
2702@kindex --no-isolation
2703@item --no-isolation
2704Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2705
2706@kindex --no-seh
2707@item --no-seh
2708The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2709this image.
2710
2711@kindex --no-bind
2712@item --no-bind
2713Do not bind this image.
2714
2715@kindex --wdmdriver
2716@item --wdmdriver
2717The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2718
2f563b51
DK
2719@kindex --tsaware
2720@item --tsaware
2721The image is Terminal Server aware.
2722
0cb112f7
CF
2723@kindex --insert-timestamp
2724@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2725@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2726Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2727as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2728other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2729will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2730same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2731can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2732that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2733identically.
252b5132
RH
2734@end table
2735
0285c67d
NC
2736@c man end
2737
ac145307
BS
2738@ifset C6X
2739@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2740
2741@c man begin OPTIONS
2742
2743The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2744libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2745all executables use an index of 0.
2746
2747@table @gcctabopt
2748
2749@kindex --dsbt-size
2750@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2751This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2752or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2753entries.
2754
2755@kindex --dsbt-index
2756@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2757This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2758to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2759executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2760@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2761
fbd9ad90
PB
2762@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2763The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2764exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2765
ac145307
BS
2766@end table
2767
2768@c man end
2769@end ifset
2770
93fd0973
SC
2771@ifset M68HC11
2772@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2773
2774@c man begin OPTIONS
2775
2776The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2777memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2778
2779@table @gcctabopt
2780
2781@kindex --no-trampoline
2782@item --no-trampoline
2783This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2784is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2785instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2786
2787@kindex --bank-window
2788@item --bank-window @var{name}
2789This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2790the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2791The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2792paging and addresses within the memory window.
2793
2794@end table
2795
2796@c man end
2797@end ifset
2798
7fb9f789
NC
2799@ifset M68K
2800@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2801
2802@c man begin OPTIONS
2803
2804The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2805when linking for 68K targets.
2806
2807@table @gcctabopt
2808
2809@kindex --got
2810@item --got=@var{type}
2811This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2812@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2813@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2814Info entry for @file{ld}.
2815
2816@end table
2817
2818@c man end
2819@end ifset
2820
833794fc
MR
2821@ifset MIPS
2822@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2823
2824@c man begin OPTIONS
2825
2826The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2827generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2828
2829@table @gcctabopt
2830
2831@kindex --insn32
2832@item --insn32
2833@kindex --no-insn32
2834@itemx --no-insn32
2835These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2836generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2837or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
283832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2839used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2840possible.
2841
2842@end table
2843
2844@c man end
2845@end ifset
2846
252b5132
RH
2847@ifset UsesEnvVars
2848@node Environment
2849@section Environment Variables
2850
0285c67d
NC
2851@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2852
560e09e9 2853You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2854@ifclear SingleFormat
2855@code{GNUTARGET},
2856@end ifclear
2857@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2858
36f63dca 2859@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2860@kindex GNUTARGET
2861@cindex default input format
2862@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2863use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2864of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2865@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2866of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2867attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2868this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2869there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2870object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2871BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2872in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2873@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2874
2875@kindex LDEMULATION
2876@cindex default emulation
2877@cindex emulation, default
2878@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2879@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2880behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2881available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2882the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2883variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2884linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2885
2886@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2887@cindex demangling, default
2888Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2889@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2890default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2891a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2892may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2893options.
2894
0285c67d
NC
2895@c man end
2896@end ifset
2897
252b5132
RH
2898@node Scripts
2899@chapter Linker Scripts
2900
2901@cindex scripts
2902@cindex linker scripts
2903@cindex command files
2904Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2905written in the linker command language.
2906
2907The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2908the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2909the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2910more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2911direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2912described below.
2913
2914The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2915yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2916linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2917to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2918such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2919
2920You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2921line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2922default linker script.
2923
2924You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2925to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2926Linker Scripts}.
2927
2928@menu
2929* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2930* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2931* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2932* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2933* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2934* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2935* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2936* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2937* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2938* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2939* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2940@end menu
2941
2942@node Basic Script Concepts
2943@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2944@cindex linker script concepts
2945We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2946describe the linker script language.
2947
2948The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2949file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2950@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2951The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2952purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2953among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2954section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2955in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2956
2957Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2958also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2959contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2960the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2961A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2962area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2963loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2964which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2965of debugging information.
2966
2967Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2968first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2969the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2970@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2971section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2972same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2973is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2974(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2975based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2976RAM address would be the VMA.
2977
2978You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2979program with the @samp{-h} option.
2980
2981Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2982@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2983has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2984information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2985will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2986static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2987referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2988
2989You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2990program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2991option.
2992
2993@node Script Format
2994@section Linker Script Format
2995@cindex linker script format
2996Linker scripts are text files.
2997
2998You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2999either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3000symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3001generally ignored.
3002
3003Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3004If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3005otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3006double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3007file name.
3008
3009You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3010@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3011to whitespace.
3012
3013@node Simple Example
3014@section Simple Linker Script Example
3015@cindex linker script example
3016@cindex example of linker script
3017Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3018
3019The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3020@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3021memory layout of the output file.
3022
3023The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3024describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3025code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3026@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3027Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3028your input files.
3029
3030For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30310x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3032linker script which will do that:
3033@smallexample
3034SECTIONS
3035@{
3036 . = 0x10000;
3037 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3038 . = 0x8000000;
3039 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3040 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3041@}
3042@end smallexample
3043
3044You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3045followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3046descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3047
252b5132
RH
3048The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3049sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3050counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3051other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3052current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3053incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3054@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3055
3056The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3057required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3058after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3059which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3060wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3061means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3062
3063Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3064@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3065@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3066
3067The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3068the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3069at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3070output section, the value of the location counter will be
3071@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3072effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3073immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3074
3075The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3076alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3077example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3078sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3079may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3080sections.
3081
3082That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3083
3084@node Simple Commands
3085@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3086@cindex linker script simple commands
3087In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3088
3089@menu
3090* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3091* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3092@ifclear SingleFormat
3093* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3094@end ifclear
3095
4a93e180 3096* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3097* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3098@end menu
3099
3100@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3101@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3102@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3103@cindex start of execution
3104@cindex first instruction
3105@cindex entry point
3106The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3107point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3108entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3109@smallexample
3110ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3114entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3115stopping when one of them succeeds:
3116@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3117@item
252b5132 3118the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3119@item
252b5132 3120the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3121@item
3ab904c4
NC
3122the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3123targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3124check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3125@item
252b5132 3126the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3127@item
252b5132
RH
3128The address @code{0}.
3129@end itemize
3130
3131@node File Commands
36f63dca 3132@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3133@cindex linker script file commands
3134Several linker script commands deal with files.
3135
3136@table @code
3137@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3138@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3139@cindex including a linker script
3140Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3141be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3142with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
314310 levels deep.
3144
4006703d
NS
3145You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3146@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3147
252b5132
RH
3148@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3149@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3150@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3151@cindex input files in linker scripts
3152@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3153@cindex linker script input object files
3154The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3155in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3156
3157For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3158a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3159then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3160
3161In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3162script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3163
e3f2db7f
AO
3164In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3165with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3166located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3167for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3168open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3169linker will search through the archive library search path.
3170The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3171as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3172description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3173
ff5dcc92 3174If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3175name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3176@samp{-l}.
3177
3178When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3179files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3180script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3181
3182@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3183@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3184@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3185@cindex grouping input files
3186The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3187files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3188new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3189in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3190
b717d30e
JJ
3191@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3192@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3193@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3194This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3195commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3196as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3197with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3198when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3199@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3200and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3201setting afterwards.
3202
252b5132
RH
3203@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3204@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3205@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3206The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3207@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3208@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3209Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3210precedence.
3211
3212You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3213output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3214
3215@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3216@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3217@cindex library search path in linker script
3218@cindex archive search path in linker script
3219@cindex search path in linker script
3220The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3221@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3222@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3223on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3224are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3225the command line option are searched first.
3226
3227@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3228@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3229@cindex first input file
3230The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3231that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3232though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3233when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3234first file.
3235@end table
3236
3237@ifclear SingleFormat
3238@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3239@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3240A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3241
3242@table @code
3243@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3244@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3245@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3246@cindex output file format in linker script
3247The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3248output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3249exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3250(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3251line option takes precedence.
3252
3253You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3254formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3255This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3256desired endianness.
3257
3258If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3259will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3260output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3261used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3262
3263For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3264command:
3265@smallexample
3266OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3267@end smallexample
3268This says that the default format for the output file is
3269@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3270option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3271format.
3272
3273@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3274@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3275@cindex input file format in linker script
3276The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3277files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3278This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3279(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3280is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3281command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3282@end table
3283@end ifclear
3284
4a93e180
NC
3285@node REGION_ALIAS
3286@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3287@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3288@cindex region alias
3289@cindex region names
3290
3291Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3292@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3293
3294@smallexample
3295REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3296@end smallexample
3297
3298The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3299memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3300to memory regions. An example follows.
3301
3302Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3303memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3304that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3305non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3306access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3307read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3308sections:
3309
3310@itemize @bullet
3311@item
3312@code{.text} program code;
3313@item
3314@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3315@item
3316@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3317@item
3318@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3319@end itemize
3320
3321The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3322part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3323output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3324systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3325@code{C}:
3326@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3327@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3328@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3329@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3330@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3331@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3332@end multitable
3333The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3334loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3335the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3336the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3337
3338The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3339includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3340memory layout:
3341@smallexample
3342INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3343
3344SECTIONS
3345 @{
3346 .text :
3347 @{
3348 *(.text)
3349 @} > REGION_TEXT
3350 .rodata :
3351 @{
3352 *(.rodata)
3353 rodata_end = .;
3354 @} > REGION_RODATA
3355 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3356 @{
3357 data_start = .;
3358 *(.data)
3359 @} > REGION_DATA
3360 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3361 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3362 .bss :
3363 @{
3364 *(.bss)
3365 @} > REGION_BSS
3366 @}
3367@end smallexample
3368
3369Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3370regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3371variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3372@table @code
3373@item A
3374Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3375@smallexample
3376MEMORY
3377 @{
3378 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3379 @}
3380
3381REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3382REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3383REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3384REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3385@end smallexample
3386@item B
3387Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3388into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3389@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3390@smallexample
3391MEMORY
3392 @{
3393 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3394 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3395 @}
3396
3397REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3398REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3399REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3400REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3401@end smallexample
3402@item C
3403Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3404@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3405initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3406system start into the @code{RAM}.
3407@smallexample
3408MEMORY
3409 @{
3410 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3411 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3412 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3413 @}
3414
3415REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3416REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3417REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3418REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3419@end smallexample
3420@end table
3421
3422It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3423@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3424necessary:
3425@smallexample
3426#include <string.h>
3427
3428extern char data_start [];
3429extern char data_size [];
3430extern char data_load_start [];
3431
3432void copy_data(void)
3433@{
3434 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3435 @{
3436 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3437 @}
3438@}
3439@end smallexample
3440
252b5132 3441@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3442@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3443There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3444
3445@table @code
3446@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3447@kindex ASSERT
3448@cindex assertion in linker script
3449Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3450with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3451
3452@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3453@kindex EXTERN
3454@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3455Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3456symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3457modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3458each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3459command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3460
3461@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3462@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3463@cindex common allocation in linker script
3464This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3465to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3466output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3467
4818e05f
AM
3468@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3469@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3470@cindex common allocation in linker script
3471This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3472command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3473to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3474
53d25da6
AM
3475@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3476@kindex INSERT
3477@cindex insert user script into default script
3478This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3479augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3480inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3481@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3482default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3483sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3484linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3485insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3486linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3487default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3488of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3489to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3490is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3491
3492@smallexample
3493SECTIONS
3494@{
3495 OVERLAY :
3496 @{
3497 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3498 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3499 @}
3500@}
3501INSERT AFTER .text;
3502@end smallexample
3503
252b5132
RH
3504@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3505@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3506@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3507This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3508references among certain output sections.
3509
3510In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3511using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3512will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3513errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3514a function defined in the other section.
3515
3516The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3517@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3518an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3519@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3520names.
3521
3522@ifclear SingleFormat
3523@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3524@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3525@cindex machine architecture
3526@cindex architecture
3527Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3528of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3529architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3530the @samp{-f} option.
3531@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3532
3533@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3534@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3535This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3536@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3537in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3538@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3539@end table
3540
3541@node Assignments
3542@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3543@cindex assignment in scripts
3544@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3545@cindex variables, defining
3546You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3547the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3548
3549@menu
3550* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3551* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3552* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3553* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3554* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3555@end menu
3556
3557@node Simple Assignments
3558@subsection Simple Assignments
3559
3560You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3561
3562@table @code
3563@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3564@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3565@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3566@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3567@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3568@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3569@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3570@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3571@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3572@end table
3573
3574The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3575@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3576defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3577
3578The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3579may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3580
3581The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3582
3583Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3584
3585You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3586statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3587section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3588
3589The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3590expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3591
3592Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3593assignments may be used:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596floating_point = 0;
3597SECTIONS
3598@{
3599 .text :
3600 @{
3601 *(.text)
3602 _etext = .;
3603 @}
156e34dd 3604 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3605 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3606@}
3607@end smallexample
3608@noindent
3609In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3610zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3611the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3612defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3613upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3614
eb8476a6
MR
3615@node HIDDEN
3616@subsection HIDDEN
3617@cindex HIDDEN
3618For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3619exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3620
3621Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3622@code{HIDDEN}:
3623
3624@smallexample
3625HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3626SECTIONS
3627@{
3628 .text :
3629 @{
3630 *(.text)
3631 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3632 @}
3633 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3634 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3635@}
3636@end smallexample
3637@noindent
3638In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3639
252b5132
RH
3640@node PROVIDE
3641@subsection PROVIDE
3642@cindex PROVIDE
3643In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3644only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3645the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3646@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3647@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3648@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3649@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3650@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3651
3652Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3653@smallexample
3654SECTIONS
3655@{
3656 .text :
3657 @{
3658 *(.text)
3659 _etext = .;
3660 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3661 @}
3662@}
3663@end smallexample
3664
3665In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3666underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3667the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3668underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3669If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3670linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3671
7af8e998
L
3672@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3673@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3674@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3675Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3676hidden and won't be exported.
3677
73ae6183
NC
3678@node Source Code Reference
3679@subsection Source Code Reference
3680
3681Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3682intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3683a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3684symbol that does not have a value.
3685
3686Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3687transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3688stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3689prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3690mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3691of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3692variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3693linker script variable might be referred to as:
3694
3695@smallexample
3696 extern int foo;
3697@end smallexample
3698
3699But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3700
3701@smallexample
3702 _foo = 1000;
3703@end smallexample
3704
3705In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3706transformation has taken place.
3707
3708When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3709things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3710in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3711second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3712table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3713contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3714value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3715
3716@smallexample
3717 int foo = 1000;
3718@end smallexample
3719
10bf6894 3720creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3721holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3722number 1000 is initially stored.
3723
3724When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3725first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3726memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3727So:
3728
3729@smallexample
3730 foo = 1;
3731@end smallexample
3732
3733looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3734associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3735address. Whereas:
3736
3737@smallexample
3738 int * a = & foo;
3739@end smallexample
3740
10bf6894 3741looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3742and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3743the variable @samp{a}.
3744
3745Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3746the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3747an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3748
3749@smallexample
3750 foo = 1000;
3751@end smallexample
3752
3753creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3754the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3755address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3756linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3757access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3758
3759Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3760you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3761use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3762section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3763linker script contains these declarations:
3764
3765@smallexample
3766@group
3767 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3768 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3769 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3770@end group
3771@end smallexample
3772
3773Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3774
3775@smallexample
3776@group
3777 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3778
73ae6183
NC
3779 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3780@end group
3781@end smallexample
3782
3783Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3784
252b5132 3785@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3786@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3787@kindex SECTIONS
3788The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3789into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3790
3791The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3792@smallexample
3793SECTIONS
3794@{
3795 @var{sections-command}
3796 @var{sections-command}
3797 @dots{}
3798@}
3799@end smallexample
3800
3801Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3802
3803@itemize @bullet
3804@item
3805an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3806@item
3807a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3808@item
3809an output section description
3810@item
3811an overlay description
3812@end itemize
3813
3814The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3815@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3816those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3817understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3818the layout of the output file.
3819
3820Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3821below.
3822
3823If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3824linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3825section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3826input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3827example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3828in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3829
3830@menu
3831* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3832* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3833* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3834* Input Section:: Input section description
3835* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3836* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3837* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3838* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3839* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3840@end menu
3841
3842@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3843@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3844The full description of an output section looks like this:
3845@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3846@group
7e7d5768 3847@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3848 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3849 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3850 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3851 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3852 @{
3853 @var{output-section-command}
3854 @var{output-section-command}
3855 @dots{}
abc9061b 3856 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3857@end group
3858@end smallexample
3859
3860Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3861
3862The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3863name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3864The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3865the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3866The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3867
3868Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3869
3870@itemize @bullet
3871@item
3872a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3873@item
3874an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3875@item
3876data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3877@item
3878a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3879@end itemize
3880
3881@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3882@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3883@cindex name, section
3884@cindex section name
3885The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3886meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3887support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3888must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3889example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3890output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3891names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3892quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3893characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3894commas must be quoted.
3895
3896The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3897Discarding}.
3898
3899@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3900@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3901@cindex address, section
3902@cindex section address
3903The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3904address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3905is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3906
3907If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3908section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3909to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3910alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3911contained within the output section.
3912
3913The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3914
3915@itemize @bullet
3916@item
3917If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3918is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3919in that region.
3920
3921@item
3922If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3923regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3924section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3925be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3926
3927@item
3928If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3929the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3930counter.
3931@end itemize
3932
3933@noindent
3934For example:
3935
252b5132
RH
3936@smallexample
3937.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3938@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3939
252b5132
RH
3940@noindent
3941and
ea5cae92 3942
252b5132
RH
3943@smallexample
3944.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3945@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3946
252b5132
RH
3947@noindent
3948are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3949@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3950counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3951counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3952input sections.
252b5132
RH
3953
3954The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3955For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3956so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3957do something like this:
3958@smallexample
3959.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3960@end smallexample
3961@noindent
3962This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3963aligned upward to the specified value.
3964
3965Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3966location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3967sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3968
3969@node Input Section
36f63dca 3970@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3971@cindex input sections
3972@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3973The most common output section command is an input section description.
3974
3975The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3976You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3977in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3978map the input files into your memory layout.
3979
3980@menu
3981* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3982* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3983* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3984* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3985* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3986@end menu
3987
3988@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3989@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3990@cindex input section basics
3991An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3992by a list of section names in parentheses.
3993
3994The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3995describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3996
3997The most common input section description is to include all input
3998sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3999include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4000@smallexample
4001*(.text)
4002@end smallexample
4003@noindent
18625d54
CM
4004Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4005of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4006match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4007example:
252b5132 4008@smallexample
b4346c09 4009*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4010@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4011will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4012@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4013
4014There are two ways to include more than one section:
4015@smallexample
4016*(.text .rdata)
4017*(.text) *(.rdata)
4018@end smallexample
4019@noindent
4020The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4021@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4022first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4023they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4024@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4025@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4026
4027You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4028You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4029needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4030@smallexample
4031data.o(.data)
4032@end smallexample
4033
ae17ab41
CM
4034To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4035of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4036
4037Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4038
4039@smallexample
4040@group
4041SECTIONS @{
4042 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4043 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4044@}
4045@end group
4046@end smallexample
4047
4048In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4049input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4050@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4051@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4052whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4053
967928e9
AM
4054You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4055matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4056with no whitespace around the colon.
4057
4058@table @samp
4059@item archive:file
4060matches file within archive
4061@item archive:
4062matches the whole archive
4063@item :file
4064matches file but not one in an archive
4065@end table
4066
4067Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4068wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4069single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4070@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4071within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4072also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4073other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4074from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4075command.
4076
252b5132
RH
4077If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4078the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4079commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4080@smallexample
4081data.o
4082@end smallexample
4083
967928e9
AM
4084When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4085and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4086characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4087name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4088did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4089though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4090@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4091the archive search path.
4092
4093@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4094@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4095@cindex input section wildcards
4096@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4097@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4098@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4099In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4100name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4101
4102The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4103pattern for the file name.
4104
4105The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4106
4107@table @samp
4108@item *
4109matches any number of characters
4110@item ?
4111matches any single character
4112@item [@var{chars}]
4113matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4114character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4115@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4116@item \
4117quotes the following character
4118@end table
4119
4120When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4121will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4122Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4123exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4124@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4125a @samp{/} character.
4126
4127File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4128specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4129does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4130
4131If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4132appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4133will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4134sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4135@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4136@smallexample
4137.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4138.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4139@end smallexample
4140
bcaa7b3e 4141@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4142Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4143in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4144this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4145pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4146@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4147into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4148
bcaa7b3e
L
4149@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4150@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4151difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4152descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4153Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4154reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4155
02ecc8e9
L
4156@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4157@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4158difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4159ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4160encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4161
bcaa7b3e
L
4162@cindex SORT
4163@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4164
4165When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4166can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4167
4168@enumerate
4169@item
4170@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4171It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4172sections have the same name.
4173@item
4174@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4175It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4176sections have the same alignment.
4177@item
c0065db7 4178@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4179treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4180@item
4181@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4182is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4183@item
4184All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4185@end enumerate
4186
4187When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4188section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4189takes precedence over the command line option.
4190
4191If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4192command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4193treated as nested sorting command.
4194
4195@enumerate
4196@item
4197@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4198@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4199@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4200@item
4201@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4202@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4203@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4204@end enumerate
4205
4206If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4207command line option will be ignored.
4208
eda680f8
L
4209@cindex SORT_NONE
4210@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4211section sorting option.
4212
252b5132
RH
4213If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4214@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4215precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4216
4217This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4218files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4219sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4220The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4221with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4222linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4223@smallexample
4224@group
4225SECTIONS @{
4226 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4227 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4228 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4229 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4230@}
4231@end group
4232@end smallexample
4233
4234@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4235@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4236@cindex common symbol placement
4237@cindex uninitialized data placement
4238A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4239file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4240linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4241named @samp{COMMON}.
4242
4243You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4244other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4245particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4246input files are placed in another section.
4247
4248In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4249@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4250@smallexample
4251.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4252@end smallexample
4253
4254@cindex scommon section
4255@cindex small common symbols
4256Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4257example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4258symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4259different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4260the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4261symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4262to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4263locations.
4264
4265@cindex [COMMON]
4266You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4267notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4268@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4269
4270@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4271@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4272@cindex KEEP
4273@cindex garbage collection
4274When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4275it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4276This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4277with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4278@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4279
4280@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4281@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4282The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4283to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4284start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4285@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4286follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4287@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4288@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4289All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4290files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4291
4292@smallexample
4293@group
4294SECTIONS @{
4295 outputa 0x10000 :
4296 @{
4297 all.o
4298 foo.o (.input1)
4299 @}
36f63dca
NC
4300@end group
4301@group
252b5132
RH
4302 outputb :
4303 @{
4304 foo.o (.input2)
4305 foo1.o (.input1)
4306 @}
36f63dca
NC
4307@end group
4308@group
252b5132
RH
4309 outputc :
4310 @{
4311 *(.input1)
4312 *(.input2)
4313 @}
4314@}
4315@end group
a1ab1d2a 4316@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4317
4318@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4319@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4320@cindex data
4321@cindex section data
4322@cindex output section data
4323@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4324@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4325@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4326@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4327@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4328You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4329@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4330an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4331parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4332value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4333counter.
4334
4335The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4336store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4337bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4338stored.
4339
4340For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4341of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4342@smallexample
4343BYTE(1)
4344LONG(addr)
4345@end smallexample
4346
4347When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4348same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4349target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4350@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4351@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4352
4353If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4354which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4355When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4356true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4357endianness of the first input object file.
4358
36f63dca 4359Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4360between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4361@smallexample
4362SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4363@end smallexample
4364whereas this will work:
4365@smallexample
4366SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4367@end smallexample
4368
252b5132
RH
4369@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4370@cindex holes, filling
4371@cindex unspecified memory
4372You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4373current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4374otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4375gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4376with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4377necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4378point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4379than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4380different parts of an output section.
4381
4382This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4383value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4384@smallexample
563e308f 4385FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4386@end smallexample
4387
4388The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4389section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4390part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4391entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4392precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4393expression.
252b5132
RH
4394
4395@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4396@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4397There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4398commands.
4399
4400@table @code
4401@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4402@cindex input filename symbols
4403@cindex filename symbols
4404@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4405The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4406The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4407file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4408the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4409
4410This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4411normally used for any other object file format.
4412
4413@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4414@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4415@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4416@item CONSTRUCTORS
4417When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4418unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4419destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4420arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4421automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4422For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4423linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4424@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4425ignored for other object file formats.
4426
4427The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4428constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4429Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4430the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4431first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4432of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4433compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4434formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4435@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4436the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4437destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4438@code{exit}.
4439
4440For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4441arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4442addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4443and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4444linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4445runtime code expects to see.
4446
4447@smallexample
4448 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4449 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4450 *(.ctors)
4451 LONG(0)
4452 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4453 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4454 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4455 *(.dtors)
4456 LONG(0)
4457 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4461which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4462are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4463are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4464command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4465@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4466@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4467@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4468
4469Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4470and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4471need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4472scripts.
4473
4474@end table
4475
4476@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4477@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4478@cindex discarding sections
4479@cindex sections, discarding
4480@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4481The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4482This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4483may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4484@smallexample
49c13adb 4485.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4486@end smallexample
4487@noindent
4488will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4489@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4490sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4491space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4492too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4493space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4494@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4495@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4496This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4497
a0976ea4 4498The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4499on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4500symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4501the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4502section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4503
4504@cindex /DISCARD/
4505The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4506input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4507section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4508
4509@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4510@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4511@cindex output section attributes
4512We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4513like this:
0c71d759 4514
252b5132 4515@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4516@group
7e7d5768 4517@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4518 [AT(@var{lma})]
4519 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4520 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4521 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4522 @{
4523 @var{output-section-command}
4524 @var{output-section-command}
4525 @dots{}
562d3460 4526 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4527@end group
4528@end smallexample
0c71d759 4529
252b5132
RH
4530We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4531@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4532remaining section attributes.
4533
a1ab1d2a 4534@menu
252b5132
RH
4535* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4536* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4537* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4538* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4539* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4540* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4541* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4542* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4543@end menu
4544
4545@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4546@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4547Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4548parentheses. The following types are defined:
4549
4550@table @code
4551@item NOLOAD
4552The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4553loaded into memory when the program is run.
4554@item DSECT
4555@itemx COPY
4556@itemx INFO
4557@itemx OVERLAY
4558These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4559rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4560marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4561section when the program is run.
4562@end table
4563
4564@kindex NOLOAD
4565@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4566@cindex loading, preventing
4567The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4568the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4569the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4570@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4571need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4572@smallexample
4573@group
4574SECTIONS @{
4575 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4576 @dots{}
4577@}
4578@end group
4579@end smallexample
4580
4581@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4582@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4583@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4584@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4585@cindex load address
4586@cindex section load address
4587Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4588@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4589@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4590specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4591address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4592
ea5cae92
NC
4593The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4594specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4595takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4596load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4597region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4598
4599If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4600section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4601load address:
4602
4603@itemize @bullet
4604@item
4605If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4606the LMA address as well.
4607
4608@item
4609If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4610
4611@item
4612Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4613with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4614section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4615VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4616the last section in the located region.
4617
4618@item
4619If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4620that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4621
4622@item
4623If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4624section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4625@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4626
4627@cindex ROM initialized data
4628@cindex initialized data in ROM
4629This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4630example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4631called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4632@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4633even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4634uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4635defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4636counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4637
4638@smallexample
4639@group
4640SECTIONS
4641 @{
4642 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4643 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4644 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4645 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4646 .bss 0x3000 :
4647 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4648@}
4649@end group
4650@end smallexample
4651
4652The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4653this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4654the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4655how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4656script.
4657
4658@smallexample
4659@group
4660extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4661char *src = &_etext;
4662char *dst = &_data;
4663
ea5cae92
NC
4664/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4665while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4666 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4667
ea5cae92 4668/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4669for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4670 *dst = 0;
4671@end group
4672@end smallexample
4673
bbf115d3
L
4674@node Forced Output Alignment
4675@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4676@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4677@cindex forcing output section alignment
4678@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4679You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4680alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4681intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4682
7e7d5768
AM
4683@node Forced Input Alignment
4684@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4685@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4686@cindex forcing input section alignment
4687@cindex input section alignment
4688You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4689SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4690sections, whether larger or smaller.
4691
0c71d759
NC
4692@node Output Section Constraint
4693@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4694@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4695@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4696@cindex constraints on output sections
4697You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4698of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4699read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4700@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4701
252b5132 4702@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4703@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4704@kindex >@var{region}
4705@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4706@cindex memory regions and sections
4707You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4708using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4709
4710Here is a simple example:
4711@smallexample
4712@group
4713MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4714SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4715@end group
4716@end smallexample
4717
4718@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4719@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4720@kindex :@var{phdr}
4721@cindex section, assigning to program header
4722@cindex program headers and sections
4723You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4724using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4725one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4726assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4727@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4728linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4729
4730Here is a simple example:
4731@smallexample
4732@group
4733PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4734SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4735@end group
4736@end smallexample
4737
4738@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4739@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4740@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4741@cindex section fill pattern
4742@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4743You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4744@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4745(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4746within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4747alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4748necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4749of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4750an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4751fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4752other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4753pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4754expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4755
4756You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4757output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4758
4759Here is a simple example:
4760@smallexample
4761@group
563e308f 4762SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4763@end group
4764@end smallexample
4765
4766@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4767@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4768@kindex OVERLAY
4769@cindex overlays
4770An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4771are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4772the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4773copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4774required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4775can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4776than another.
4777
4778Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4779@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4780output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4781command is as follows:
4782@smallexample
4783@group
4784OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4785 @{
4786 @var{secname1}
4787 @{
4788 @var{output-section-command}
4789 @var{output-section-command}
4790 @dots{}
4791 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4792 @var{secname2}
4793 @{
4794 @var{output-section-command}
4795 @var{output-section-command}
4796 @dots{}
4797 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4798 @dots{}
abc9061b 4799 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4800@end group
4801@end smallexample
4802
4803Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4804section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4805section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4806those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4807except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4808sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4809
abc9061b
CC
4810The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4811the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4812
252b5132
RH
4813The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4814addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4815memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4816whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4817and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4818and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4819
56dd11f0
NC
4820If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4821references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4822the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4823sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4824@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4825
4826For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4827provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4828defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4829@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4830the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4831within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4832symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4833
4834At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4835the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4836
4837Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4838@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4839@smallexample
4840@group
4841 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4842 @{
4843 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4844 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4845 @}
4846@end group
4847@end smallexample
4848@noindent
4849This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4850address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4851@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4852following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4853@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4854@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4855
4856C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4857like the following.
4858
4859@smallexample
4860@group
4861 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4862 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4863 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4864@end group
4865@end smallexample
4866
4867Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4868everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4869example could have been written identically as follows.
4870
4871@smallexample
4872@group
4873 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4874 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4875 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4876 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4877 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4878 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4879 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4880@end group
4881@end smallexample
4882
4883@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4884@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4885@kindex MEMORY
4886@cindex memory regions
4887@cindex regions of memory
4888@cindex allocating memory
4889@cindex discontinuous memory
4890The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4891memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4892
4893The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4894memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4895may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4896can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4897set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4898regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4899around to fit into the available regions.
4900
4901A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4902command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4903you wish. The syntax is:
4904@smallexample
4905@group
a1ab1d2a 4906MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4907 @{
4908 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4909 @dots{}
4910 @}
4911@end group
4912@end smallexample
4913
4914The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4915region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4916Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4917with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4918must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4919add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4920command.
252b5132
RH
4921
4922@cindex memory region attributes
4923The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4924whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4925not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4926@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4927section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4928the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4929them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4930
4931The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4932@table @samp
4933@item R
4934Read-only section
4935@item W
4936Read/write section
4937@item X
4938Executable section
4939@item A
4940Allocatable section
4941@item I
4942Initialized section
4943@item L
4944Same as @samp{I}
4945@item !
c09e9a8c 4946Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4947@end table
4948
4949If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4950@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4951attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4952in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4953attributes.
4954
4955@kindex ORIGIN =
4956@kindex o =
4957@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4958The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4959the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4960cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4961abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4962@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4963
4964@kindex LENGTH =
4965@kindex len =
4966@kindex l =
4967The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4968region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4969be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4970@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4971
4972In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4973available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4974and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4975linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4976is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4977or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4978explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4979region.
4980
4981@smallexample
4982@group
a1ab1d2a 4983MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4984 @{
4985 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4986 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4987 @}
4988@end group
4989@end smallexample
4990
4991Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4992specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4993@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4994a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4995output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4996was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4997the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4998output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4999region, the linker will issue an error message.
5000
3ec57632 5001It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5002expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5003@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5004
5005@smallexample
5006@group
c0065db7 5007 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5008@end group
5009@end smallexample
5010
252b5132
RH
5011@node PHDRS
5012@section PHDRS Command
5013@kindex PHDRS
5014@cindex program headers
5015@cindex ELF program headers
5016@cindex program segments
5017@cindex segments, ELF
5018The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5019@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5020loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5021program with the @samp{-p} option.
5022
5023When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5024reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5025program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5026This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5027interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5028
5029The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5030in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5031precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5032the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5033not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5034
5035The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5036generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5037ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5038
5039This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5040@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5041
5042@smallexample
5043@group
5044PHDRS
5045@{
5046 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5047 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5048@}
5049@end group
5050@end smallexample
5051
5052The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5053of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5054header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5055with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5056must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5057is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5058
5059Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5060system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5061specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5062sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5063attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5064Section Phdr}.
5065
5066It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5067merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5068repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5069contain the section.
5070
5071If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5072then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5073not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5074convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5075placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5076default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5077segment at all.
5078
5079@kindex FILEHDR
5080@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5081You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5082the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5083The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5084file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5085include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5086segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5087these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5088
5089The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5090value of the keyword.
5091
5092@table @asis
5093@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5094Indicates an unused program header.
5095
5096@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5097Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5098the file.
5099
5100@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5101Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5102
5103@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5104Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5105found.
5106
5107@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5108Indicates a segment holding note information.
5109
5110@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5111A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5112ABI.
5113
5114@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5115Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5116
5117@item @var{expression}
5118An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5119be used for types not defined above.
5120@end table
5121
5122You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5123in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5124@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5125Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5126output section attribute.
5127
5128The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5129which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5130explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5131an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5132header.
5133
5134Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5135headers used on a native ELF system.
5136
5137@example
5138@group
5139PHDRS
5140@{
5141 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5142 interp PT_INTERP ;
5143 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5144 data PT_LOAD ;
5145 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5146@}
5147
5148SECTIONS
5149@{
5150 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5151 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5152 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5153 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5154 @dots{}
5155 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5156 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5157 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5158 @dots{}
5159@}
5160@end group
5161@end example
5162
5163@node VERSION
5164@section VERSION Command
5165@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5166@cindex symbol versions
5167@cindex version script
5168@cindex versions of symbols
5169The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5170only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5171symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5172a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5173shared library.
5174
5175You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5176you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5177also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5178
5179The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5180@smallexample
5181VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5182@end smallexample
5183
5184The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5185Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5186version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5187version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5188version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5189scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5190library.
5191
5192The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5193examples.
5194
5195@smallexample
5196VERS_1.1 @{
5197 global:
5198 foo1;
5199 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5200 old*;
5201 original*;
5202 new*;
252b5132
RH
5203@};
5204
5205VERS_1.2 @{
5206 foo2;
5207@} VERS_1.1;
5208
5209VERS_2.0 @{
5210 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5211 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5212 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5213 "f(int, double)";
5214 @};
252b5132
RH
5215@} VERS_1.2;
5216@end smallexample
5217
5218This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5219version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5220The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5221a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5222of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5223symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5224is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5225in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5226However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5227name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5228
5229Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5230depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5231to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5232
5233Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5234depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5235and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5236
5237When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5238specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5239unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5240unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5241somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5242wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5243wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5244set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5245ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5246
5247The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5248they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5249could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5250However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5251
0f6bf451 5252Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5253in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5254symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5255won't.
5256
5257@smallexample
7c9c73be 5258@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5259@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5260
252b5132
RH
5261When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5262symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5263requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5264shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5265loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5266linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5267application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5268way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5269all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5270search for each symbol reference.
5271
5272The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5273doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5274that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5275functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5276the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5277required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5278that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5279versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5280the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5281
5282There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5283first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5284source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5285script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5286maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5287@smallexample
5288__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5289@end smallexample
5290@noindent
5291in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5292be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5293The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5294@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5295takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5296
5297The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5298function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5299an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5300version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5301linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5302
5303To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5304source file. Here is an example:
5305
5306@smallexample
5307__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5308__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5309__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5310__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5311@end smallexample
5312
5313In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5314unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5315example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5316@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5317
5318When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5319some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5320this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5321@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5322declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5323you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5324
5325If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5326within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5327(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5328specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5329
cb840a31
L
5330You can also specify the language in the version script:
5331
5332@smallexample
5333VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5334@end smallexample
5335
c0065db7 5336The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5337The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5338demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5339patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5340@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5341
86043bbb
MM
5342Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5343described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5344or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5345the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5346whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5347cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5348might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5349should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5350expect when you upgrade.
5351
252b5132
RH
5352@node Expressions
5353@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5354@cindex expressions
5355@cindex arithmetic
5356The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5357that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5358expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5359host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5360
5361You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5362
5363The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5364expressions.
5365
5366@menu
5367* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5368* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5369* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5370* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5371* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5372* Operators:: Operators
5373* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5374* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5375* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5376@end menu
5377
5378@node Constants
5379@subsection Constants
5380@cindex integer notation
5381@cindex constants in linker scripts
5382All constants are integers.
5383
5384As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5385octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5386hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5387@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5388@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5389value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5390
5391@cindex scaled integers
5392@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5393@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5394@cindex suffixes for integers
5395@cindex integer suffixes
5396In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5397constant by
5398@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5399@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5400@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5401@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5402@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5403@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5404@tex
5405${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5406@end tex
5407@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5408respectively. For example, the following
5409all refer to the same quantity:
5410
252b5132 5411@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5412_fourk_1 = 4K;
5413_fourk_2 = 4096;
5414_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5415_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5416@end smallexample
5417
8a308ae8
NC
5418Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5419conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5420
0c71d759
NC
5421@node Symbolic Constants
5422@subsection Symbolic Constants
5423@cindex symbolic constants
5424@kindex CONSTANT
5425It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5426the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5427
5428@table @code
5429@item MAXPAGESIZE
5430@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5431The target's maximum page size.
5432
5433@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5434@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5435The target's default page size.
5436@end table
5437
5438So for example:
5439
5440@smallexample
9d5777a3 5441 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5442@end smallexample
5443
5444will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5445supported by the target.
5446
252b5132
RH
5447@node Symbols
5448@subsection Symbol Names
5449@cindex symbol names
5450@cindex names
5451@cindex quoted symbol names
5452@kindex "
5453Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5454and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5455Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5456specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5457keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5458@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5459"SECTION" = 9;
5460"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5461@end smallexample
5462
5463Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5464to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5465whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5466
ecca9871
L
5467@node Orphan Sections
5468@subsection Orphan Sections
5469@cindex orphan
5470Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5471are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5472script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5473output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5474placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5475attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5476same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5477If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5478at the end of the file.
5479
5480For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5481well as section flag.
5482
41911f68 5483If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5484the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5485__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5486section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5487orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5488representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5489character.
5490
252b5132
RH
5491@node Location Counter
5492@subsection The Location Counter
5493@kindex .
5494@cindex dot
5495@cindex location counter
5496@cindex current output location
5497The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5498current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5499location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5500within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5501anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5502
5503@cindex holes
5504Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5505moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5506location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5507and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5508doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5509
5510@smallexample
5511SECTIONS
5512@{
5513 output :
5514 @{
5515 file1(.text)
5516 . = . + 1000;
5517 file2(.text)
5518 . += 1000;
5519 file3(.text)
563e308f 5520 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5521@}
5522@end smallexample
5523@noindent
5524In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5525located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5526followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5527@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5528@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5529specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5530
5c6bbab8
NC
5531@cindex dot inside sections
5532Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5533current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5534statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5535absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5536however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5537not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5538
5539@smallexample
5540SECTIONS
5541@{
5542 . = 0x100
5543 .text: @{
5544 *(.text)
5545 . = 0x200
5546 @}
5547 . = 0x500
5548 .data: @{
5549 *(.data)
5550 . += 0x600
5551 @}
5552@}
5553@end smallexample
5554
5555The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5556and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5557the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5558much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5559move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5560and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5561the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5562the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5563
b5666f2f
AM
5564@cindex dot outside sections
5565Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5566output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5567needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5568
5569@smallexample
5570SECTIONS
5571@{
5572 start_of_text = . ;
5573 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5574 end_of_text = . ;
5575
5576 start_of_data = . ;
5577 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5578 end_of_data = . ;
5579@}
5580@end smallexample
5581
5582If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5583not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5584between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5585should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5586blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5587the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5588sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5589statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5590special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5591place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5592as follows:
5593
5594@smallexample
5595SECTIONS
5596@{
5597 start_of_text = . ;
5598 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5599 end_of_text = . ;
5600
5601 start_of_data = . ;
5602 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5603 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5604 end_of_data = . ;
5605@}
5606@end smallexample
5607
5608This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5609@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5610placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5611assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5612a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5613section. So you could write:
5614
5615@smallexample
5616SECTIONS
5617@{
5618 start_of_text = . ;
5619 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5620 end_of_text = . ;
5621
5622 . = . ;
5623 start_of_data = . ;
5624 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5625 end_of_data = . ;
5626@}
5627@end smallexample
5628
5629Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5630@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5631
252b5132
RH
5632@need 2000
5633@node Operators
5634@subsection Operators
5635@cindex operators for arithmetic
5636@cindex arithmetic operators
5637@cindex precedence in expressions
5638The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5639the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5640@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5641@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5642@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5643@smallexample
5644precedence associativity Operators Notes
5645(highest)
56461 left ! - ~ (1)
56472 left * / %
56483 left + -
56494 left >> <<
56505 left == != > < <= >=
56516 left &
56527 left |
56538 left &&
56549 left ||
565510 right ? :
565611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5657(lowest)
5658@end smallexample
5659Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5660(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5661(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5662@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5663@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5664@tex
5665\vskip \baselineskip
5666%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5667\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5668\hrule
5669\halign
5670{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5671height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5672&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5673height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5674\noalign{\hrule}
5675height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5676&highest&&&&&\cr
5677% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5678&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5679&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5680&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5681&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5682&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5683&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5684&7&&left&&|&\cr
5685&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5686&9&&left&&||&\cr
5687&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5688&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5689&lowest&&&&&\cr
5690height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5691\hrule}
5692@end tex
5693@iftex
5694{
5695@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5696@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5697@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5698}
5699@end iftex
5700@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5701
5702@node Evaluation
5703@subsection Evaluation
5704@cindex lazy evaluation
5705@cindex expression evaluation order
5706The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5707an expression when absolutely necessary.
5708
5709The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5710address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5711regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5712as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5713
5714However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5715until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5716other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5717for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5718
5719The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5720assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5721allocation.
5722
5723Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5724@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5725
5726If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5727available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5728following
5729@smallexample
5730@group
5731SECTIONS
5732 @{
a1ab1d2a 5733 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5734 @{ *(.text) @}
5735 @}
5736@end group
5737@end smallexample
5738@noindent
5739will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5740address}.
5741
5742@node Expression Section
5743@subsection The Section of an Expression
5744@cindex expression sections
5745@cindex absolute expressions
5746@cindex relative expressions
5747@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5748@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5749@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5750Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5751relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5752using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5753value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5754symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5755operations.
5756
abf4be64
AM
5757Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5758section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5759address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5760@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5761functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5762One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5763(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5764differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5765versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5766section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5767Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5768absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5769given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5770everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5771
5772In the following simple example,
252b5132 5773
7542af2a
AM
5774@smallexample
5775@group
5776SECTIONS
5777 @{
5778 . = 0x100;
5779 __executable_start = 0x100;
5780 .data :
5781 @{
5782 . = 0x10;
5783 __data_start = 0x10;
5784 *(.data)
5785 @}
5786 @dots{}
5787 @}
5788@end group
5789@end smallexample
252b5132 5790
7542af2a
AM
5791both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5792address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5793@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5794section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5795
5c3049d2
AM
5796For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5797addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5798
5799@itemize @bullet
5800@item
c05f749e
AM
5801Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5802operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5803absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5804@item
7542af2a
AM
5805Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5806relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5807and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5808@item
c05f749e
AM
5809Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5810in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5811address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5812before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5813@end itemize
5814
5815The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5816
5817@itemize @bullet
5818@item
5819An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5820@item
5821The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5822@item
9bc8bb33 5823The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5824relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5825(after above conversions) is also a number.
5826@item
5827The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5828relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5829section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5830@item
5831The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5832conversions) is an absolute address.
5833@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5834
5835You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5836to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5837create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5838section @samp{.data}:
5839@smallexample
5840SECTIONS
5841 @{
5842 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5843 @}
5844@end smallexample
5845@noindent
5846If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5847@samp{.data} section.
5848
7542af2a
AM
5849Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5850particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5851
252b5132
RH
5852@node Builtin Functions
5853@subsection Builtin Functions
5854@cindex functions in expressions
5855The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5856use in linker script expressions.
5857
5858@table @code
5859@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5860@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5861@cindex expression, absolute
5862Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5863of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5864value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5865normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5866
5867@item ADDR(@var{section})
5868@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5869@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5870Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5871script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5872the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5873@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5874@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5875the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5876@smallexample
5877@group
5878SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5879 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5880 @{
252b5132
RH
5881 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5882 @dots{}
5883 @}
5884 .output :
5885 @{
5886 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5887 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5888 @}
5889@dots{} @}
5890@end group
5891@end smallexample
5892
876f4090
NS
5893@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5894@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5895@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5896@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5897@cindex round up location counter
5898@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5899@cindex round up expression
5900@cindex align expression
5901Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5902to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5903doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5904arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5905expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5906equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5907
5908Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5909next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5910variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5911input sections:
252b5132
RH
5912@smallexample
5913@group
5914SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5915 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5916 *(.data)
5917 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5918 @}
5919@dots{} @}
5920@end group
5921@end smallexample
5922@noindent
5923The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5924a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5925a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5926of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5927
5928The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5929
362c1d1a
NS
5930@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5931@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5932@cindex section alignment
5933Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5934been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5935evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5936the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5937value in that section.
5938@smallexample
5939@group
5940SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5941 .output @{
5942 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5943 @dots{}
5944 @}
5945@dots{} @}
5946@end group
5947@end smallexample
5948
252b5132
RH
5949@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5950@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5951This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5952scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5953section.
5954
2d20f7bf
JJ
5955@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5956@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5957This is equivalent to either
5958@smallexample
5959(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5960@end smallexample
5961or
5962@smallexample
5963(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5964@end smallexample
5965@noindent
5966depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5967for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5968@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5969If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5970memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5971bytes in the on-disk file.
5972
5973This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5974any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5975@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5976be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5977working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5978
5979@noindent
5980Example:
5981@smallexample
5982 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5983@end smallexample
5984
5985@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5986@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5987This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5988evaluation purposes.
5989
5990@smallexample
5991 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5992@end smallexample
5993
a4f5ad88
JJ
5994@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5995@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5996This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5997@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5998When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5999does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6000@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6001boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6002it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6003@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6004padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6005section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6006
6007@smallexample
6008 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6009@end smallexample
6010
252b5132
RH
6011@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6012@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6013@cindex symbol defaults
6014Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6015defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6016return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6017default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6018shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6019the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6020existed, its value is preserved:
6021
6022@smallexample
6023@group
6024SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6025 .text : @{
6026 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6027 @dots{}
6028 @}
6029 @dots{}
6030@}
6031@end group
6032@end smallexample
6033
3ec57632
NC
6034@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6035@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6036Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6037
252b5132
RH
6038@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6039@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6040@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6041Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6042Section LMA}).
6043
2e53f7d6
NC
6044@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6045@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6046Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6047@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6048
252b5132
RH
6049@kindex MAX
6050@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6051Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6052
6053@kindex MIN
6054@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6055Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6056
6057@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6058@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6059@cindex unallocated address, next
6060Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6061This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6062use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6063output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6064
3ec57632
NC
6065@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6066@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6067Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6068
ba916c8a
MM
6069@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6070@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6071Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6072value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6073@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6074will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6075can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6076``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6077name.
6078
252b5132
RH
6079@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6080@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6081@cindex section size
6082Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6083been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6084evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6085@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6086@smallexample
6087@group
6088SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6089 .output @{
6090 .start = . ;
6091 @dots{}
6092 .end = . ;
6093 @}
6094 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6095 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6096@dots{} @}
6097@end group
6098@end smallexample
6099
6100@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6101@itemx sizeof_headers
6102@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6103@cindex header size
6104Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6105information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6106this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6107choose, to facilitate paging.
6108
6109@cindex not enough room for program headers
6110@cindex program headers, not enough room
6111When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6112@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6113number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6114addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6115additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6116room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6117the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6118script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6119you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6120command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6121@end table
6122
6123@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6124@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6125@cindex implicit linker scripts
6126If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6127an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6128linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6129linker will report an error.
6130
6131An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6132
6133Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6134assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6135commands.
6136
6137Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6138at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6139read. This can affect archive searching.
6140
6141@ifset GENERIC
6142@node Machine Dependent
6143@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6144
6145@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6146@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6147sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6148functionality are not listed.
6149
6150@menu
36f63dca
NC
6151@ifset H8300
6152* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6153@end ifset
6154@ifset I960
6155* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6156@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6157@ifset M68HC11
6158* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6159@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6160@ifset ARM
6161* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6162@end ifset
6163@ifset HPPA
6164* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6165@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6166@ifset M68K
6167* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6168@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6169@ifset MIPS
6170* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6171@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6172@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6173* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6174@end ifset
2469cfa2 6175@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6176* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6177@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6178@ifset NDS32
6179* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6180@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6181@ifset NIOSII
6182* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6183@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6184@ifset POWERPC
6185* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6186@end ifset
6187@ifset POWERPC64
6188* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6189@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6190@ifset SPU
6191* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6192@end ifset
74459f0e 6193@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6194* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6195@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6196@ifset WIN32
6197* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6198@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6199@ifset XTENSA
6200* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6201@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6202@end menu
6203@end ifset
6204
252b5132
RH
6205@ifset H8300
6206@ifclear GENERIC
6207@raisesections
6208@end ifclear
6209
6210@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6211@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6212
6213@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6214For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6215you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6216
6217@table @emph
6218@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6219@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6220@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6221targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6222program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6223respectively.
6224
6225@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6226@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6227@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6228@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6229sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6230page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6231(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6232@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6233top page of memory).
1502569c 6234
81f5558e
NC
6235@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6236indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6237displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6238the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6239@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6240whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6241range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6242
1502569c 6243@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6244@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6245biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6246which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6247page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6248(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6249@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6250the top page of memory).
6251
6252@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6253@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
625432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6255changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6256(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6257@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6258the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6259@end table
6260
6261@ifclear GENERIC
6262@lowersections
6263@end ifclear
6264@end ifset
6265
36f63dca 6266@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6267@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6268@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6269@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6270@node Renesas
6271@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6272
c2dcd04e
NC
6273@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6274H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6275options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6276@end ifset
6277@end ifclear
6278
6279@ifset I960
6280@ifclear GENERIC
6281@raisesections
6282@end ifclear
6283
6284@node i960
6285@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6286
6287@cindex i960 support
6288
6289You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6290specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6291family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6292incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6293linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6294libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6295search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6296
6297For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6298well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6299paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6300the names
6301
6302@smallexample
6303@group
6304try
6305libtry.a
6306tryca
6307libtryca.a
6308@end group
6309@end smallexample
6310
6311@noindent
6312The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6313two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6314
6315You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6316the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6317use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6318specifies a library.
6319
6320@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6321@cindex relaxing on i960
6322@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6323you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6324@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6325them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6326instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6327instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6328target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6329not itself call any subroutines).
6330
6331@ifclear GENERIC
6332@lowersections
6333@end ifclear
6334@end ifset
6335
6336@ifset ARM
6337@ifclear GENERIC
6338@raisesections
6339@end ifclear
6340
93fd0973
SC
6341@ifset M68HC11
6342@ifclear GENERIC
6343@raisesections
6344@end ifclear
6345
6346@node M68HC11/68HC12
6347@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6348
6349@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6350
6351@subsection Linker Relaxation
6352
6353For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6354optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6355
6356@table @emph
6357@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6358@item relaxing address modes
6359@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6360targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6361program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6362respectively.
6363
6364@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6365transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6366page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6367
6368@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6369When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6370of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6371addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6372@code{bset} instructions.
6373
6374@end table
6375
6376@subsection Trampoline Generation
6377
6378@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6379@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6380For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6381call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6382will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6383trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6384case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6385point to the function trampoline.
6386
6387@ifclear GENERIC
6388@lowersections
6389@end ifclear
6390@end ifset
6391
36f63dca 6392@node ARM
3674e28a 6393@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6394
6395@cindex ARM interworking support
6396@kindex --support-old-code
6397For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6398between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6399been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6400line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6401libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6402option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6403given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6404which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6405the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6406non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6407
6408@cindex thumb entry point
6409@cindex entry point, thumb
6410@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6411The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6412@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6413But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6414branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6415executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6416
ce11ba6c
KT
6417@cindex PE import table prefixing
6418@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6419The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6420the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6421element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6422import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6423
e489d0ae
PB
6424@cindex BE8
6425@kindex --be8
6426The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6427executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6428The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6429
3674e28a
PB
6430@cindex TARGET1
6431@kindex --target1-rel
6432@kindex --target1-abs
6433The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6434@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6435or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6436and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6437
6438@cindex TARGET2
6439@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6440The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6441@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6442meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6443@table @samp
6444@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6445@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6446@item abs
6447@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6448@item got-rel
6449@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6450@end table
6451
319850b4
JB
6452@cindex FIX_V4BX
6453@kindex --fix-v4bx
6454The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6455specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6456interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6457also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6458
6459In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6460linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6461@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6462
6463In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6464relocations are ignored.
6465
845b51d6
PB
6466@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6467@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6468Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6469relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6470
6471@smallexample
6472TST rM, #1
6473MOVEQ PC, rM
6474BX Rn
6475@end smallexample
6476
6477This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6478and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6479condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6480
33bfe774
JB
6481@cindex USE_BLX
6482@kindex --use-blx
6483The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6484BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6485situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6486code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6487each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6488
6489This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6490specify it if you are using that target.
6491
c6dd86c6
JB
6492@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6493@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6494The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6495bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6496instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6497to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6498the support code can read the intended values.
6499
6500The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6501intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6502and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6503intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6504full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6505you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6506
6507If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6508enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6509@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6510mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6511vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6512@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6513
6514If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6515potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6516such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6517first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6518instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6519the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6520are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6521
2de70689
MGD
6522@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6523@kindex --fix-arm1176
6524@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6525The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6526in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6527are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6528unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6529
9d5777a3 6530Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6531Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6532http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6533
bf21ed78
MS
6534@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6535@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6536The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6537warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6538enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6539linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6540using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6541not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6542
6543@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6544@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6545The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6546warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6547@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6548linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6549using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6550
726150b7
NC
6551@cindex PIC_VENEER
6552@kindex --pic-veneer
6553The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6554ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6555is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6556@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6557
6558@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6559@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6560The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6561code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6562perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6563placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6564controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6565The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6566duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6567group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6568code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6569where they should be placed.
6570
6571The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6572@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6573placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6574branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6575placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6576value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6577exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6578A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6579linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6580from the input sections.
6581
6582The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6583@samp{N = +1}.
6584
1a51c1a4
NC
6585Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6586only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6587otherwise.
6588
1db37fe6
YG
6589@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6590@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6591@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6592The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6593
6594The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6595
68fcca92
JW
6596@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6597@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6598@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6599The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6600
6601Please contact ARM for further details.
6602
1db37fe6
YG
6603@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6604@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6605@cindex Merging exidx entries
6606The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6607
6608@kindex --long-plt
6609@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6610The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6611which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6612entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6613
36f63dca
NC
6614@ifclear GENERIC
6615@lowersections
6616@end ifclear
6617@end ifset
6618
6619@ifset HPPA
6620@ifclear GENERIC
6621@raisesections
6622@end ifclear
6623
6624@node HPPA ELF32
6625@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6626@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6627@kindex --multi-subspace
6628When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6629import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6630The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6631stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6632multiple sub-spaces.
6633
6634@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6635@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6636Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6637stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6638@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6639sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6640a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6641the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6642conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6643prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6644A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6645branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6646@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6647@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6648detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6649positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6650
6651Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6652single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6653create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6654large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6655
6656@ifclear GENERIC
6657@lowersections
6658@end ifclear
6659@end ifset
6660
7fb9f789
NC
6661@ifset M68K
6662@ifclear GENERIC
6663@raisesections
6664@end ifclear
6665
6666@node M68K
6667@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6668
6669@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6670@kindex --got=@var{type}
6671The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6672The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6673@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6674the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6675@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6676entries only at non-negative offsets.
6677@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6678entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6679support such GOTs.
6680@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6681output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6682file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6683files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6684
6685@ifclear GENERIC
6686@lowersections
6687@end ifclear
6688@end ifset
6689
833794fc
MR
6690@ifset MIPS
6691@ifclear GENERIC
6692@raisesections
6693@end ifclear
6694
6695@node MIPS
6696@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6697
6698@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6699@kindex --insn32
6700@kindex --no-insn32
6701The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6702microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6703in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6704used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6705or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6706including 16-bit ones where possible.
6707
6708@ifclear GENERIC
6709@lowersections
6710@end ifclear
6711@end ifset
6712
36f63dca
NC
6713@ifset MMIX
6714@ifclear GENERIC
6715@raisesections
6716@end ifclear
6717
6718@node MMIX
6719@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6720For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6721@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6722understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6723can translate between the two formats.
6724
6725There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6726Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6727registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6728equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6729@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6730global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6731this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6732symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6733
7a2de473
HPN
6734Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6735@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6736The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6737of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6738
6739Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6740are left out from an mmo file.
6741
6742@ifclear GENERIC
6743@lowersections
6744@end ifclear
6745@end ifset
6746
6747@ifset MSP430
6748@ifclear GENERIC
6749@raisesections
6750@end ifclear
6751
6752@node MSP430
6753@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6754For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6755will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6756just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6757
6758@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6759The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6760
6761@table @code
6762@item @samp{.vectors}
6763Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6764
6765@item @samp{.bootloader}
6766Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6767in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6768
6769@item @samp{.infomem}
6770Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6771this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6772
c0065db7 6773@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6774This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6775in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6776
6777@item @samp{.noinit}
6778Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6779
c0065db7 6780The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6781@end table
6782
6783@ifclear GENERIC
6784@lowersections
6785@end ifclear
6786@end ifset
6787
35c08157
KLC
6788@ifset NDS32
6789@ifclear GENERIC
6790@raisesections
6791@end ifclear
6792
6793@node NDS32
6794@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6795@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6796For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6797relaxes objects according to these options.
6798
6799@table @code
6800@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6801Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6802
6803@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6804Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6805
6806@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6807Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6808
6809@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6810Export the EX9 table after linking.
6811
6812@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6813Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6814
6815@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6816Update the existing EX9 table.
6817
6818@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6819Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6820
6821@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6822Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6823
6824@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6825Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6826
6827@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6828Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6829@end table
6830
6831@ifclear GENERIC
6832@lowersections
6833@end ifclear
6834@end ifset
6835
78058a5e
SL
6836@ifset NIOSII
6837@ifclear GENERIC
6838@raisesections
6839@end ifclear
6840
6841@node Nios II
6842@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6843@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6844@kindex --relax on Nios II
6845
6846Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6847transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6848which may result in @command{ld} giving
6849@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6850The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6851trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6852outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6853trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6854be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6855larger than 256MB.
6856
6857The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6858is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6859@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6860locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6861source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6862register as a temporary.
6863
6864Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6865relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6866option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6867
6868@ifclear GENERIC
6869@lowersections
6870@end ifclear
6871@end ifset
6872
2a60a7a8
AM
6873@ifset POWERPC
6874@ifclear GENERIC
6875@raisesections
6876@end ifclear
6877
6878@node PowerPC ELF32
6879@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6880@cindex PowerPC long branches
6881@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6882Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6883displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6884@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6885@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6886the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6887section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6888section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6889@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6890both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6891considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6892
6893@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6894@table @option
6895@cindex PowerPC PLT
6896@kindex --bss-plt
6897@item --bss-plt
6898Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6899generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6900the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6901writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6902@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6903PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6904compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6905BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6906
016687f8
AM
6907@kindex --secure-plt
6908@item --secure-plt
6909@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6910@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6911when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6912layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6913style BSS PLT.
6914
2a60a7a8
AM
6915@cindex PowerPC GOT
6916@kindex --sdata-got
6917@item --sdata-got
6918The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6919sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6920@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6921section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6922@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6923@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6924@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6925@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6926PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6927pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6928GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6929really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6930
6931@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6932@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6933@item --emit-stub-syms
6934This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6935symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6936
6937@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6938@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6939@item --no-tls-optimize
6940PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6941sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6942disable the optimization.
6943@end table
6944
6945@ifclear GENERIC
6946@lowersections
6947@end ifclear
6948@end ifset
6949
6950@ifset POWERPC64
6951@ifclear GENERIC
6952@raisesections
6953@end ifclear
6954
6955@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6956@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6957
6958@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6959@table @option
6960@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6961@kindex --stub-group-size
6962@item --stub-group-size
6963Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6964by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6965@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6966sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6967a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6968the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6969conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6970prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6971A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6972branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6973@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6974@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6975detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6976positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6977
6978Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6979single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6980create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6981large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6982
6983@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6984@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6985@item --emit-stub-syms
6986This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6987symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6988
6989@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6990@kindex --dotsyms
6991@kindex --no-dotsyms
6992@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6993These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6994in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6995function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6996code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6997properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6998to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6999@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7000dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7001feature.
7002
7003@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7004@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7005@item --no-tls-optimize
7006PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7007sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7008disable the optimization.
7009
7010@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7011@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7012@item --no-opd-optimize
7013PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7014corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7015the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7016Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7017
7018@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7019@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7020@item --non-overlapping-opd
7021Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7022@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7023the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7024entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7025
7026@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7027@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7028@item --no-toc-optimize
7029PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7030entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7031reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7032marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7033marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7034relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7035unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7036reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7037discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7038reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7039code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7040optimization.
7041
7042@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7043@kindex --no-multi-toc
7044@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7045If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7046@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7047where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7048entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7049total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7050grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7051TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7052calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7053help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
705464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7055Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7056
7057@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7058@kindex --no-toc-sort
7059@item --no-toc-sort
7060By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7061happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7062placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7063with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7064referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7065@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7066results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7067off this feature.
7068
7069@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7070@kindex --plt-align
7071@kindex --no-plt-align
7072@item --plt-align
7073@itemx --no-plt-align
7074Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7075padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7076specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7077that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7078stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7079
7080@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7081@kindex --plt-static-chain
7082@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7083@item --plt-static-chain
7084@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7085Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7086chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7087chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7088
7089@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7090@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7091@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7092@item --plt-thread-safe
7093@itemx --no-thread-safe
7094With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7095lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7096another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7097order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7098memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7099barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7100looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7101seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7102default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7103@end table
7104
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@lowersections
7107@end ifclear
7108@end ifset
7109
49fa1e15
AM
7110@ifset SPU
7111@ifclear GENERIC
7112@raisesections
7113@end ifclear
7114
7115@node SPU ELF
7116@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7117
7118@cindex SPU ELF options
7119@table @option
7120
7121@cindex SPU plugins
7122@kindex --plugin
7123@item --plugin
7124This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7125
7126@cindex SPU overlays
7127@kindex --no-overlays
7128@item --no-overlays
7129Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7130regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7131@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7132turns off all this special overlay handling.
7133
7134@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7135@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7136@item --emit-stub-syms
7137This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7138symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7139
7140@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7141@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7142@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7143This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7144function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7145on calls to non-overlay regions.
7146
7147@cindex SPU local store size
7148@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7149@item --local-store=lo:hi
7150@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7151the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7152range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7153
c0065db7 7154@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7155@kindex --stack-analysis
7156@item --stack-analysis
7157SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7158unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7159under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7160@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7161@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7162determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7163for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7164for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7165for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7166find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7167and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7168under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7169dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7170is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7171and calls will be given.
7172
c0065db7 7173@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7174@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7175@item --emit-stack-syms
7176This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7177in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7178These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7179functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7180functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7181such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7182The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7183@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7184@end table
7185
7186@ifclear GENERIC
7187@lowersections
7188@end ifclear
7189@end ifset
7190
36f63dca
NC
7191@ifset TICOFF
7192@ifclear GENERIC
7193@raisesections
7194@end ifclear
7195
7196@node TI COFF
7197@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7198@cindex TI COFF versions
7199@kindex --format=@var{version}
7200The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7201TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7202also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7203format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7204header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7205
7206@ifclear GENERIC
7207@lowersections
7208@end ifclear
7209@end ifset
7210
2ca22b03
NC
7211@ifset WIN32
7212@ifclear GENERIC
7213@raisesections
7214@end ifclear
7215
7216@node WIN32
7217@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7218
c0065db7 7219This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7220See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7221command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7222
7223@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7224@cindex import libraries
7225@item import libraries
69da35b5 7226The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7227libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7228regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7229archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7230support for creating such libraries provided with the
7231@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7232
c0065db7
RM
7233@item exporting DLL symbols
7234@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7235The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7236
7237@table @emph
7238@item using auto-export functionality
7239@cindex using auto-export functionality
7240By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7241which is controlled by the following command line options:
7242
0a5d968e
NC
7243@itemize
7244@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7245@item --exclude-symbols
7246@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7247@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7248@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7249@end itemize
7250
09e2aba4
DK
7251When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7252(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7253symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7254often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7255private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7256options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7257exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7258final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7259
7260If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7261command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7262if either of the following are true:
7263
7264@itemize
7265@item A DEF file is used.
7266@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7267@end itemize
dc8465bf 7268
c0065db7
RM
7269@item using a DEF file
7270@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7271Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7272an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7273exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7274name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7275command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7276
7277@example
7278gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7279@end example
7280
0a5d968e
NC
7281Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7282@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7283
dc8465bf
NC
7284Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7285
7286@example
4b5bd4e7 7287LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7288
7289EXPORTS
7290foo
7291bar
7292_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7293another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7294var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7295doo = foo == foo2
7296eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7297@end example
dc8465bf 7298
7fcab871 7299This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7300symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7301alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7302by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7303@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7304@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7305export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7306in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7307symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7308
6b31ad16
DS
7309The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7310name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7311the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7312
b45619c0
NC
7313When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7314library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7315@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7316executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7317
7318With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7319specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7320non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7321
7322If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7323or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7324filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7325
4b5bd4e7
DS
7326The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7327
7328@example
7329EXPORTS
7330 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7331 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7332 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7333@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7334
7335Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7336@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7337@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7338@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7339Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7340@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7341string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7342
7343The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7344
7345@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7346will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7347by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7348linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7349library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7350
7351@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7352The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7353the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7354@code{*_imp__foo}).
7355
7356@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7357well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7358read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7359variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7360the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7361extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7362application will behave unexpectedly.
7363
7364@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7365it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7366symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7367API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7368the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7369
4b5bd4e7
DS
7370See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7371other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7372
7373@cindex creating a DEF file
7374While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7375with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7376
7377@item Using decorations
7378@cindex Using decorations
7379Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7380itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7381declared as:
7382
7383@example
7384__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7385__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7386@end example
7387
7388All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7389any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7390this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7391the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7392
7393Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7394decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7395instead:
7396
7397@example
7398__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7399__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7400@end example
7401
c0065db7
RM
7402This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7403when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7404variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7405code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7406of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7407omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7408@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7409information.
c0065db7 7410@end table
dc8465bf 7411
2ca22b03
NC
7412@cindex automatic data imports
7413@item automatic data imports
7414The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7415by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7416compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7417issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7418code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7419c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7420initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7421decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7422platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7423command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7424The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7425suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7426trigger the feature's use.
7427
c0065db7 7428auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7429additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7430
c0065db7 7431"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7432documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7433
c0065db7
RM
7434The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7435occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7436One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7437below.
7438
7439@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7440For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7441object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7442offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7443field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7444in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7445without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7446The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7447references.
7448
c0065db7
RM
7449The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7450be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7451themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7452runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7453compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7454support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7455run without error on an older system.
7456
c0065db7
RM
7457@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7458enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7459
7460@cindex direct linking to a dll
7461@item direct linking to a dll
7462The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7463including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7464libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7465traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7466libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7467function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7468though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7469storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7470tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7471large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7472
c0065db7 7473Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7474@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7475of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7476perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7477select the dll instead of an import library.
7478
2ca22b03 7479
69da35b5
NC
7480For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7481to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7482
7483@example
45e948fe
NC
7484libxxx.dll.a
7485xxx.dll.a
7486libxxx.a
7487xxx.lib
69da35b5 7488cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7489libxxx.dll
7490xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7491@end example
7492
69da35b5
NC
7493before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7494
c0065db7
RM
7495(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7496where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7497@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7498file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7499@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7500
c0065db7
RM
7501Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7502@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7503was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7504various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7505could coexist on the same machine.
7506
2ca22b03
NC
7507The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7508applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7509libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7510
7511@example
7512bin/
7513 cygxxx.dll
7514lib/
7515 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7516 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7517@end example
7518
c0065db7
RM
7519Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7520done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7521
75221. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7523@example
7524gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7525@end example
2ca22b03 7526
69da35b5
NC
7527However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7528(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7529@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7530not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7531
2ca22b03
NC
75322. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7533directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7534should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7535making the app/dll.
7536
7537@example
7538ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7539@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7540
7541Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7542
7543@example
7544gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7545@end example
69da35b5
NC
7546
7547This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7548perfectly legal
7549
7550@example
7551bin/
7552 cygxxx-5.dll
7553lib/
c0065db7 7554 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7555@end example
7556
dc8465bf 7557Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7558even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7559@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7560
7561Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7562wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7563
75641. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7565work with auto-imported data.
7566
dc8465bf
NC
75672. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7568import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7569symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7570for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7571possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7572
45e948fe
NC
75733. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7574critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7575in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7576stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7577
69da35b5 7578So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7579true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7580a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7581binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7582massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7583requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7584will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7585
c0065db7 7586@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7587@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7588@item adding additional names
7589Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7590A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7591exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7592when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7593import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7594
c0065db7 7595@example
dc8465bf
NC
7596LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7597
7598EXPORTS
c0065db7 7599foo
dc8465bf 7600_foo = foo
c0065db7 7601@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7602
7603The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7604
7605Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7606source code using the "weak" attribute:
7607
c0065db7
RM
7608@example
7609void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7610void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7611@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7612
7613See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7614symbols.
7615
7616@item renaming symbols
7617Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7618kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7619@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7620DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7621created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7622
c0065db7 7623@example
dc8465bf
NC
7624LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7625
7626EXPORTS
7627_foo = foo
c0065db7 7628@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7629
7630The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7631@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7632@end table
dc8465bf 7633
0a5d968e 7634Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7635unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7636If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7637@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7638that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7639@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7640renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7641to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7642the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7643In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7644which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7645
7646@cindex weak externals
7647@item weak externals
7648The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7649weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7650defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7651are three variants of weak externals:
7652@itemize
7653@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7654called lazy externals.
7655@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7656This form is not presently implemented.
7657@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7658implemented.
7659@end itemize
7660As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7661are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7662uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7663
7664@cindex aligned common symbols
7665@item aligned common symbols
7666As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7667desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7668the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7669carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7670by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7671tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7672but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7673warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7674
2ca22b03
NC
7675@end table
7676
7677@ifclear GENERIC
7678@lowersections
7679@end ifclear
7680@end ifset
7681
e0001a05
NC
7682@ifset XTENSA
7683@ifclear GENERIC
7684@raisesections
7685@end ifclear
7686
7687@node Xtensa
7688@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7689
7690@cindex Xtensa processors
7691The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7692@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7693specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7694keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7695example, with the command:
7696
7697@smallexample
7698SECTIONS
7699@{
7700 .text : @{
7701 *(.literal .text)
7702 @}
7703@}
7704@end smallexample
7705
7706@noindent
7707@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7708and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7709literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7710interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7711group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7712files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7713and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7714
43cd72b9 7715@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7716@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7717Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7718provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7719is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7720literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7721will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7722location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7723the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7724unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7725@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7726range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7727
7728For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7729to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7730instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7731instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7732instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7733@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7734hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7735By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7736switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7737density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7738instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7739performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7740linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7741a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7742
7743The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7744control the linker:
7745
7746@cindex Xtensa options
7747@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7748@item --size-opt
7749When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7750more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7751no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7752alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7753preserve the correctness of the code.
7754@end table
e0001a05
NC
7755
7756@ifclear GENERIC
7757@lowersections
7758@end ifclear
7759@end ifset
7760
252b5132
RH
7761@ifclear SingleFormat
7762@node BFD
7763@chapter BFD
7764
7765@cindex back end
7766@cindex object file management
7767@cindex object formats available
7768@kindex objdump -i
7769The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7770These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7771object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7772format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7773it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7774associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7775object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7776(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7777list all the formats available for your configuration.
7778
7779@cindex BFD requirements
7780@cindex requirements for BFD
7781As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7782several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7783BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7784formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7785been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7786BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7787may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7788
7789One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7790mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7791useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7792conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7793
7794@menu
7795* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7796@end menu
7797
7798@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7799@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7800@cindex opening object files
7801@include bfdsumm.texi
7802@end ifclear
7803
7804@node Reporting Bugs
7805@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7806@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7807@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7808
ff5dcc92 7809Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7810
7811Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7812it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7813to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7814work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7815@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7816
7817In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7818information that enables us to fix the bug.
7819
7820@menu
7821* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7822* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7823@end menu
7824
7825@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7826@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7827@cindex bug criteria
7828
7829If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7830
7831@itemize @bullet
7832@cindex fatal signal
7833@cindex linker crash
7834@cindex crash of linker
7835@item
7836If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7837@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7838
7839@cindex error on valid input
7840@item
ff5dcc92 7841If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7842
7843@cindex invalid input
7844@item
ff5dcc92 7845If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7846may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7847object files are correct.
7848
7849@item
7850If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7851improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7852@end itemize
7853
7854@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7855@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7856@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7857@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7858
7859A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7860products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7861recommend you contact that organization first.
7862
7863You can find contact information for many support companies and
7864individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7865distribution.
7866
ad22bfe8 7867@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7868Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7869@value{BUGURL}.
7870@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7871
7872The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7873@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7874fact or leave it out, state it!
7875
7876Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7877problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7878assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7879matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7880the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7881location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7882were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7883into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7884specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7885and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7886
7887Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7888the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7889on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7890
7891Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7892bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7893respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7894You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7895
7896To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7897
7898@itemize @bullet
7899@item
ff5dcc92 7900The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7901the @samp{--version} argument.
7902
7903Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7904the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7905
7906@item
ff5dcc92 7907Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7908patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7909
7910@item
7911The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7912version number.
7913
7914@item
ff5dcc92 7915What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7916``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7917
7918@item
7919The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7920observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7921list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7922sufficient.
7923
7924If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7925and then we might not encounter the bug.
7926
7927@item
7928A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7929bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7930provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7931bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7932state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7933requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7934we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7935attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7936
7937If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7938@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7939object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7940@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7941how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7942
7943@item
7944A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7945incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7946
ff5dcc92 7947Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7948will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7949not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7950a chance to make a mistake.
7951
7952Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7953say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7954copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7955C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7956and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7957fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7958you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7959any conclusion from our observations.
7960
7961@item
ff5dcc92 7962If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7963diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7964@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7965If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7966context, not by line number.
7967
7968The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7969sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7970@end itemize
7971
7972Here are some things that are not necessary:
7973
7974@itemize @bullet
7975@item
7976A description of the envelope of the bug.
7977
7978Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7979which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7980changes will not affect it.
7981
7982This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7983will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7984with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7985We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7986
7987Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7988of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7989output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7990less time, and so on.
7991
7992However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7993report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7994
7995@item
7996A patch for the bug.
7997
7998A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7999the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8000a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8001to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8002
ff5dcc92 8003Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8004construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8005through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8006able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8007fixed.
8008
8009And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8010patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8011help us to understand.
8012
8013@item
8014A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8015
8016Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8017things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8018@end itemize
8019
8020@node MRI
8021@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8022@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8023To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8024linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8025alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8026described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8027simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8028@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8029linker commands; these commands are described here.
8030
8031In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8032file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8033features to make use of them.
8034
8035You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8036@samp{-c} command-line option.
8037
8038Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8039command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8040blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8041MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8042issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8043
8044Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8045
8046You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8047lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8048The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8049
8050@table @code
8051@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8052@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8053@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8054Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8055the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8056@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8057your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8058script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8059commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8060input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8061@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8062
8063@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8064@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8065Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8066in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8067
8068@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8069
8070@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8071@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8072Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8073@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8074
8075@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8076@item BASE @var{expression}
8077Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8078absolute addresses) in the output file.
8079
8080@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8081@item CHIP @var{expression}
8082@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8083This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8084
8085@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8086@item END
8087This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8088
8089@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8090@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8091Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8092language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8093
8094@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8095@item
252b5132
RH
8096S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8097
8098@item
8099IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8100
8101@item
8102COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8103@samp{COFF}
8104@end enumerate
8105
8106@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8107@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8108Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8109@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8110
8111The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8112same line, with no change in its effect.
8113
8114@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8115@item LOAD @var{filename}
8116@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8117Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8118same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8119command line.
8120
8121@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8122@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8123@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8124MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8125option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8126
8127@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8128@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8129@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8130Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8131order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8132script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8133sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8134file, in the order specified.
8135
8136@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8137@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8138@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8139@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8140Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8141@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8142
8143@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8144@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8145@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8146@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8147You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8148specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8149If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8150@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8151@end table
8152
793c5807
NC
8153@node GNU Free Documentation License
8154@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8155@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8156
370b66a1
CD
8157@node LD Index
8158@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8159
8160@printindex cp
8161
8162@tex
7ca01ed9 8163% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8164% meantime:
8165\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8166\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8167\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8168\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8169\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8170\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8171\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8172\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8173\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8174% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8175@end tex
8176
252b5132 8177@bye